OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT
®
500L
FIAT
®
500L
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16BF-126-AD
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................87
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................161
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................265
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................353
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................385
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................447
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................455
10
INDEX .....................................................................467
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintain-
ing its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front floor pan under the passenger seat, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Ignition Switch ........................11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key................13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................14
▫ Replacement Keys .....................15
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..............15
▫ To Arm The System ....................16
▫ To Disarm The System ...................16
▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped ..........................17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ................18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............19
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........20
▫ Request For Additional Remote Controls ......20
▫ Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control..............................20
▫ General Information ....................21
2
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................21
▫ Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open . . .23
▫ Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors) .....24
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................24
▫ To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System ......................24
䡵 POWER WINDOWS .....................25
▫ Power Window Switches .................25
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................28
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................28
▫ Liftgate Emergency Release ...............29
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........30
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............30
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................32
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........43
▫ Child Restraints .......................59
▫ Transporting Pets ......................80
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....80
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................81
▫ Transporting Passengers..................81
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................82
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................83
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................85
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob contains an
integrated key. To use the mechanical key simply push
the mechanical key release button.
NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer.
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch can be turned to three different
positions:
• STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical
devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking sys-
tem, etc.) can operate;
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with automatic transmis-
sions, the transmission must be in PARK before the key
can be removed.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
• AVV: engine start-up;
• MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are
enabled.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that
requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the
engine does not start, before the starting operation can be
repeated.
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-
sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the park-
ing brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the
key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light on the instrument panel will flash.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and close
all doors.
3. The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will switch on for approxi-
mately 3 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security
Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
After approximately 3 seconds, the Vehicle Security
Light will flash. This shows that the Vehicle Security
Alarm is fully armed.
The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed
by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors,
hood and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the
system.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second
time even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly
closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the
system. Contact your authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Push UNLOCK on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob,
once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, when you pull
the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, push the UNLOCK button on the key fob to
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to
break-in attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device
each time you park your car.
Safe Lock Device Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by
quickly double-pushing the LOCK button on the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not acti-
vate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside the
passenger compartment by entering the car through, and
then closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
• By pushing the UNLOCK button on the key fob;
• By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry key fob. The key
fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five
seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob With Mechanical Key
Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls. Should
a new remote control be necessary, go to an authorized
dealer, taking an ID document and the car ownership
documents.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
Key Fob Components
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push button A to open the metal insert B.
2. Turn the screw C to Unlock using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case D and replace the battery E
making sure that polarities are correct.
4. Refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it
turning the screw C to Lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
specified by law, see your authorized dealer for assis-
tance needed.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Push the central LOCK/UNLOCK button located on the
instrument panel, in the switch bank below the radio.
The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors
are locked or unlocked.
• LED ON: Doors locked. Pushing the central LOCK/
UNLOCK button once will unlock all doors. The LED
will switch off once the doors are unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• LED OFF: doors unlocked. Pushing the central
LOCK/UNLOCK button once will lock all doors. The
LED will switch on once the doors are locked.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob, it will
no longer be possible to unlock them by pressing central
LOCK/UNLOCK button.
NOTE: With central locking active (LED ON), opening
one of the front doors, it is possible to perform a central
unlocking (LED OFF). With central locking active (LED
ON), in order to open one of the rear passenger doors, it
is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice. With
one of the rear door open (LED OFF), the unlocking is
performed only for that door, not for all the vehicle.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must pull
the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the
door handle a second time to open the door.
Central LOCK/UNLOCK Button
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK
or the manual transmission into REVERSE, turn
the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible locking the vehicle through the Remote
Keyless Entry, internal button or external key pawl, also
if one or more doors are open. At lock command request,
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
LED is switched ON. At closing of the last door, the
vehicle maintains the central locking status if key is not
inserted in Ignition Device, otherwise the vehicle will be
unlocked and the LED will be switched OFF.
NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch,
but is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize
the presence of the key and after the closing of last door,
the vehicle remains locked.
Auto — Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON), if
a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF), as
soon as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED
ON).
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate
clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise
to UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock
the doors using the central unlock button, roll down the
window and open the door using the exterior handle.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door, which operate the front passenger win-
dow and a single switch on each rear door that operates
the rear passenger door window. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled
to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
A — Driver Front Window
Switch
D — Driver Rear Window
Switch
B — Passenger Front Window
Switch
E — Passenger Rear Window
Switch
C — Window Lockout Switch
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch for approximately one second, re-
lease, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Pull the window switch for approximately one second,
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an auto-up operation, push
or pull again the window switch.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch and hold to
close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch down for
an additional two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob or activate the central locking button located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic release
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
(Continued)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Liftgate Emergency Release is
built into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the
Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats
completely.
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied.
3. With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow color
(A).
Yellow Tab Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
4. Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to
trigger the release tab of the trunk (follow the direction
arrow to open).
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Release Tab
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) — If Equipped
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or
MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the out-
board front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belt whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Restraints” section of this manual. The image below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air
bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bol-
ster
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a roll-
over or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side
Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of
the vehicle.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn Ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
Be Placed In Neutral
State).
2. Turn Ignition ON. Left Turn Light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Signal
Light BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Customer Action Customer Will See
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light Is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
Is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must Be Placed In
Neutral State).
Left Turn light Is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn Ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the
light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All may be removed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback and
seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Upper Tether Anchorages
Tether Anchorage Routing Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-
agesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Yes All may be removed
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................90
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................90
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .91
▫ Conversation Mirror — If Equipped .........92
▫ Power Mirrors ........................92
▫ Folding Mirrors........................93
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............93
▫ Sun Visors ...........................93
䡵 SEATS................................95
▫ Front Seats ...........................95
▫ Rear Seats............................99
▫ Head Restraints ......................104
䡵 OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD ......108
䡵 LIGHTS .............................109
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................109
▫ Headlights ..........................110
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....111
▫ High Beams..........................111
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................111
▫ Parking Lights .......................111
3
▫ Turn Signals .........................111
▫ Lane Change Assist ....................112
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........112
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........112
▫ Interior Lights .......................113
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......116
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........116
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............119
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .120
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........121
▫ To Activate ..........................122
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................123
▫ To Deactivate ........................123
▫ To Resume Speed .....................123
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............123
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............125
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ........126
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................126
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ...........127
▫ Failure Indications .....................128
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .......129
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions .......129
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................131
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .133
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .134
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............135
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........137
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......138
▫ Using HomeLink ......................140
▫ Security ............................140
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................140
▫ General Information....................141
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........142
▫ To Open ............................143
▫ To Close ............................143
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................144
▫ Power Sun Blind ......................144
䡵 POWER OUTLETS .....................144
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED ..........145
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................147
䡵 STORAGE ............................147
▫ Glove Compartment ...................147
▫ Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped . .149
䡵 REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES ........150
▫ Securing Your Load ....................155
▫ Storage Compartments ..................157
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............157
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................157
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED .......158
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............160
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................160
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the
overhead console.
To gain access to the conversation mirror, pull downward
on the mirror to the open position.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
Conversation Mirror Location
Conversation Mirror
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors.
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Sun Visor (Driver Side Shown)
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Front Seats
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
(Continued)
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out-
board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
Height Adjustment Lever
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Push the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar
support. Release the switch when you reach the desired
position.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the outer side of the seat.
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seat Switch
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Rear Seats
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Seatback Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side
of the seat and lift upward on the lever.
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Seatback Folded
Seatback Recline Lever
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the
seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback
into position.
Rear Armrest — If Equipped
To use the armrest, lower it downward.
Folding Rear Seat
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
Armrest Cupholder
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button, and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealership immediately.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re-
straints, the outboard head restraints have two comfort
positions, while the central head restraint have to use in
the raised position. When there are no occupants in the
center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maxi-
mum visibility for the driver. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint has to be in the raised
position.
NOTE: If the center rear head restraints requires removal,
see your authorized dealer.
To raise the outboard head restraints, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraints, push the
adjustment button located at the base of the head re-
straint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the outboard head restraints, raise it as far as
it can go then push the adjustment button, and the release
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle.”
Adjustment Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released to open
the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red
safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The
safety catch lever is located under the center front
edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
Safety Catch Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Operation
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off through the
touchscreen. Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual
for further information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc-
tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel again to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
radio. Push the switch once to turn the front
fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the
front fog lights off.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console,
push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
On/Right Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are
turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.
Off/Left Position
Center Position
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and
push the switch to the left to turn on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob a 10
second timer is activated.
Map/Reading Light Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
• When the doors are locked with the key fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes.
Windshield Wiper Lever
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
• In intermittent mode when the front windshield wiper
is not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper) when the front windshield wiper is
operating.
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.
With the front windshield wipers on and reverse gear
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the
same way.
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function, as de-
scribed for the windscreen wiper.
Rear Window Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located on the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — RES + 3 — CANCEL
2 — ON/OFF 4 — SET -
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica-
tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and
recommendations.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the au-
dible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the vehicle during the parking
maneuver.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle.
A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 in (30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that in-
creases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (where
provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon and message displayed
on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped).
Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the
Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference
to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor
fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is
turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va-
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
(Continued)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to your Uconnect
Supplement Manual for further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sunvisor
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink
indicator is located above the center
button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position,
HomeLink will remain active for three minutes. During
this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink is disabled.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with
an electrically operated sun blind.
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be
operated only with the ignition key turned to the MAR
position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are
located in the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
2 — Power Sunroof Switch
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
To Open
• Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second and the sunroof will stop at the vented posi-
tion. Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for
approximately one second and release, the sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”.
NOTE: During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
• With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and
hold the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second.
NOTE: During Express close any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Blind
• Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will
move towards the rear part of the vehicle, until it is
fully open.
With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch
and the blind will move towards the front part of the
vehicle, until it is fully closed.
NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing
stages, if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it
will stop the blind movement.
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Socket
The power outlet is located on the central tunnel, in front
of the gear selector, between the two cup holders. It only
operates with the ignition key at MAR/ON.
On models with optional ⬙smoker’s kit,⬙ the cigar lighter
takes the place of the power socket (see ⬙Cigar lighter⬙
paragraph).
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the central tunnel, next to the parking
brake lever. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release
the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically
returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready
for use.
Passenger Compartment Power Socket
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
NOTE:
• Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
• Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W
to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder
located in the center armrest (if equipped).
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove
compartment which is located on the right side of the
instrument panel. Push the latch button upward on the
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
upper glove compartment door to open it. Pull outward
on the lower glove compartment latch to open the lower
glove compartment. Push the upper glove compartment
door down to close it and the lower glove compartment
door upward to close it.
Upper And Lower Glove Compartments
Glove Compartment Storage
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage compartment.
To open the storage compartment push in the upper
release latch on the front of the armrest.
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage
area.
The front center armrest can also be lifted up and
adjusted in three positions, this is done by pulling up on
the armrest, push the latch down to adjust the armrest
down.
Armrest Upper Release Latch
Front Center Armrest Raised Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES
This vehicle features a load platform which can be
adjusted to three different heights, permitting modular
luggage compartment volume:
• Position 1 (platform completely lowered) permits
maximum luggage compartment capacity.
• Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits a level
load threshold to facilitate loading/unloading of ob-
jects in the luggage compartment. It also allows the
space underneath to be used as a additional compart-
ment for stowing objects which are more fragile or
small.
• Position 3 (platform completely raised) in conjunction
with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger
side seat backrests, permits long objects to be loaded. It
is advisable to use this position only for the actual
period in which the objects are transported, then
return the platform to position 1 or 2.
Tilt of cargo floor
The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle (tilted
toward the rear seat backs), in order to facilitate access to
the area below the luggage compartment. In this position
also the plan guarantees the correct locking of any objects
present inside the cargo area, avoiding that they move in
the event of sudden braking.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maximum
capacity of a distributed weight of 154 lbs (70kg) (if
positioned at threshold level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if
positioned at raised level) do not add objects with a
higher weight.
Tilt Floor Feature
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Access to double load compartment
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it with one
hand.
2. Place the desired objects in compartment.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in the housings
on the side panels and rear crossmember.
NOTE: Movements of the load platform must take place
in a central position relative to the luggage compartment.
Load Compartment Platform Housings
1 — Front Locations
2 — Rear Locations
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Moving the load platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding it with
one hand.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Position the platform correctly on housing on the side
panels.
Securing Your Load
There are two tie downs inside the luggage compartment
for attaching cables which can secure the load carried.
A further two tie downs located on the rear crossmember.
Raised Position
1 — Front Housing Locations
2 — Rear Housing Locations
Cargo Tie Down Locations
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix
loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags). To use
the hooks, push the release button.
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is
22 lbs (10 kg).
Cargo Side Panel Hook Locations
1 — Release Button
2 — Hook
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Compartments
There are two storage compartments located on the rear
side panels.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with
the climate controls on the instrument panel. Push
this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK-IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs
that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with
the climate controls on the instrument panel. Push
this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........164
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................165
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......167
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............168
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............176
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............186
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............187
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............188
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................188
▫ EVIC Screen .........................189
▫ EVIC Control Buttons ..................189
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................190
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........192
▫ Trip Computer .......................192
▫ Trip Button ..........................192
▫ Trip Functions ........................194
▫ Values Displayed ......................195
4
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)............................196
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................211
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................213
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................213
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............213
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
6.5N Settings.........................214
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................229
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL ......229
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......230
▫ Radio Operation ......................231
▫ Player Operation ......................231
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........232
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .232
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................233
▫ Manual Climate Control System ...........233
▫ Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control
System (If Equipped) ...................239
䡵 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ........252
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................252
▫ Get Started ..........................253
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................255
▫ Radio ..............................256
▫ Media..............................258
▫ Phone..............................259
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 7 — Fixed Upper Air Vent 13 — Climate Controls
2 — Steering Wheel Audio Control —
Located On Back Side Of Steering Wheel
8 — Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 14 — USB Port/SD Card/AUX Socket
3 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control
9 — Upper Glove Compartment 15 — Uconnect Audio System
4—
Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights
10 — Storage Compartment 16 — Ignition Switch
5—
Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer
11 — Lower Glove Compartment
17 —
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag / Horn
6 — Central Air Vents
12 — Upper Switch Bank
18 — Electronic Speed Control Located On
Steering Wheel
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
EVIC Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The
light should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for
4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is un-
buckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-
formation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the ESC system or
TCS system become active.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Rear Defrost Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de-
froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes..
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
This light should come and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned to the START or ON/RUN position. If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving it may indicate a problem with a passenger air bag system, if the light flickers
it may indicate an air bag warning bag failure. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indica-
tor is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
function telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not
been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds.
If equipped with a block heater harness the message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-
formation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Screen
The EVIC will display the following:
• Time
• Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers
• Outside temperature
• Gear Indicator
• Odometer (display of distance travelled in miles/
kilometers)
• Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice on
road, service, etc.)
EVIC Control Buttons
The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument
panel below the radio.
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required
menu option. Push and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to return to the main screen.
Push and release the UP
button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options
or to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the DOWN
button to scroll down-
ward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: UP
and DOWN buttons activate differ-
ent functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock, the external temperature
and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/
markets, where provided) for a few seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. The menu includes the following functions:
NOTE: Some of the Menu Items could be managed by
Uconnect (if equipped). In that case, some of these are not
present in EVIC but in Uconnect.
• Dimmer
• Headlight Adj
• Speed Buzzer
• Headlamp Sensor
• Cornering Lights
• Rain Sensor
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• First Page
• See Radio
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer
• Service
• Passenger Airbag
• Day Lights
• Hill Start
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Reset
• City Brake Control
• Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
main menu option to set.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
• Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the
first submenu option.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this sub-
menu option.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
Push and release and hold the MENU button to return to
the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer
hold).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Outside Temperature
• Range
• Trip distance A
• Average Economy A
• Instant Economy
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time).
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average Economy B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time).
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” can-
not be reset.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Economy
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instantaneous Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
NOTE: The brightness of IPC will change automatically
only if the External Light has changed: External Light On
= Night Mode, External Light OFF = Day Mode. In both
case (Day or Night) is possible to adjust the display
brightness as described in step 1 below.
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
set the required brightness level.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing settings.
Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit)
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
immediately alerted.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The dis-
play will show the message (Speed Beep).
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
select speed limit activation (On) or deactivation
(Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and
release the MENU button to display the presently set
activation speed. Pushing the UP
or DOWN
buttons selects the speed limit. Push MENU to
confirm selection.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 – 125 mph or
(32 – 201 km/h), depending on the selected unit. The
setting will increase/decrease by five units each time the
UP/DOWN button is pushed. Push and hold the UP/
DOWN button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly.
Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you
approach the required setting.
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will
flash on the display.
2. Push and release the DOWN
button. “Off” will
flash on the display.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Headlight Sensor (Automatic Headlight/Dusk
Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment)
This function is used to turn the headlights on or off
according to external light conditions.
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be adjusted according to
3 levels (level 1 = minimum sensitivity, level 2 = medium
sensitivity, level 3 = maximum sensitivity); the greater the
sensitivity set, the less the external light variation needed
to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at
sunset the headlights switch on earlier than in levels 1
and 2).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Proceed as follows to set:
• Push MENU button briefly. The level set previously
flashes on the display;
• Push the UP
or DOWN button to make the
adjustment;
• Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Cornering Lights (Activation/Deactivation Of
Cornering Lights)
This function activates/deactivates (⬙On⬙/⬙Off⬙) the cor-
nering lights (see the description in the “Exterior lights”
paragraph).
Proceed as follows to activate/deactivate the lights:
• Push the MENU button briefly. ⬙On⬙ or ⬙Off⬙ flash on
the display, according to what has been previously set;
• Push UP
or DOWN to make your choice;
• Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Rain Sensor (Rain Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment)
This function allows you to adjust the rain sensor sensi-
tivity to 4 levels.
To set the required sensitivity level, proceed as follows:
• Push the MENU button briefly. The sensitivity “level”
set previously flashes on the display;
• Push the UP
or DOWN button to make the
adjustment;
• Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information, see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU
button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to select Trip B data. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button to turn ON or OFF
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to
the main screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data Submenu Settings:
• On
• Off
• Return to MENU
Trip B Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Set Time (Clock)
This function may be used to set the clock through two
submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.”
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN buttons to highlight
Set Time — Push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
navigate the two sub-menu items.
3. Select the required option and then push and release
the MENU button.
4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly
push and release the MENU button and “hours” will
flash on the display.
5. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “min-
utes” will flash on the display.
7. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
NOTE:
• The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time the UP
or DOWN button is pushed.
Push and hold the button to increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing
the button when you approach the required set-
ting.
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to return
to the “Time” sub-function.
• When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push
and release the MENU button. The previously set
display format will flash on the display.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
select “24h” or “12h.”
When you have selected the required settings, briefly
push and release the MENU button to go back to the
Time, Mode sub-menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to
the main screen without storing the settings.
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month -
year).
To change, the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Date, push and release the MENU button and Year
will begin to flash.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button and
“month” will flash on the display.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “day”
will flash on the display.
6. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the UP
or DOWN button is pushed.
Push and hold the UP
or DOWN button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting
by briefly pushing the button when you approach the
required setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
First Page (Display Of Information On The Main
Screen)
This function allows you to choose the information you
would like to see on the main screen. You can view the
date or the trip distance.
To make your choice, proceed as follows:
• Briefly push the MENU button. ⬙Initial page⬙ will be
displayed.
• Briefly push the MENU button again to display the
⬙date⬙ and ⬙engine info⬙ options.
• Push the UP
or DOWN buttons to select the
information you wish to see on the main page of the
display.
• Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen or hold the button down to go back to the
standard screen without saving.
When the key is turned to MAR/ON and the initial check
stage is over, the display will show the information
selected via the ⬙First Page⬙ menu function.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Repetition (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor-
mation relevant to the sound system.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
activation or AutoStore.
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN arrow button to
highlight See Radio and push and release the
MENU button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
If the radio has Uconnect, refer to the appropriate
“Uconnect Radio Supplement” for further information.
Audio Repetition Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically
lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push the
UP
or DOWN button to highlight Autoclose.
Push and release the MENU button to enter Auto-
close MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit in
three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel
Economy, and Tire Pressure.”
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Units. Push and release the MENU button to enter
Units MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
navigate the three sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push
and release the MENU button.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly push
and release the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km”
will appear on the display (according to the previous
setting).
5. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the sub-menu.
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “mpg,”
“km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display
(according to the previous setting).
If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in “mpg.”
If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
1. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the sub-menu.
3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “°F” or
“°C” will appear on the display (according to the
previous setting).
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly push
and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu
screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Language. Push and release the MENU button to
enter the Language MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. The pre-
viously set volume “level” will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the BeltAlert
system. Refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System BeltAlert” in “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
To reactivate this function, proceed as follows:
• Push and release the UP
or DOWN button
briefly; ⬙Off⬙ will flash on the display. Push and
release the or UP
or DOWN button and ⬙On⬙
will appear;
• Push and release the SET ESC button briefly to return
to the submenu screen or hold the button down to
return to the main menu screen without saving.
Service (Scheduled Servicing)
This function allows you to display the information
about mileage/km intervals or time intervals for car
servicing.
To consult this display, proceed as follows:
• Briefly push the MENU button: the display shows
when servicing is due in mi/km or days according to
the previous setting (see paragraph ⬙Units of measure-
ment⬙);
• Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold it down to return to the standard screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes car
maintenance at fixed intervals. This is displayed auto-
matically, with ignition key at MAR/ON, 2000 km (or
equivalent value in miles) before servicing or, where
provided, 30 days before servicing. It is also displayed
each time the key is turned to MAR/ON or every
124 miles (200km). Below this threshold, servicing indi-
cations are more frequent. The display will be in miles
or km according to the unit of measurement set. When
the next scheduled service is approaching, the word
“Service” will appear on the display, followed by the
number of miles/kilometers or days left, when the key is
turned to MAR/ON. Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the
⬙Scheduled Servicing Plan⬙ operations will be performed
and the message will be reset.
When the service interval is reached and for about
600miles/1000 km or 30 days, a service due message is
displayed.
Airbag/Passenger Bag (Activation/Deactivation Of
Passenger Side Front Airbag And Side Bag For
Pelvis, Chest And Shoulder Protection)
This function allows the passenger airbag to be activated
/ deactivated.
Proceed as follows:
• Push the MENU button and, after the message ⬙Bag
pass: Off⬙ (to deactivate) or ⬙Bag pass: On⬙ (to activate)
is displayed by pushing UP
and DOWN but-
tons, push the MENU button again;
• A confirmation request message will appear on the
display;
• By pushing the UP
or DOWN buttons select
⬙Yes⬙ (to confirm activation/deactivation) or ⬙No⬙
(to cancel);
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Push the MENU button briefly; a message confirming
the selection is displayed and you return to the menu
screen; Hold down the button to return to the standard
screen without storing.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate/deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Push and release
the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
3. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
4. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
City Brake Control (Collision Mitigation)
This function allows to activate (⬙On⬙) or deactivate
(⬙Off⬙) the City Brake Control - ⬙Collision Mitigation⬙
system.
To adjust proceed as follows:
• Push MENU button briefly. ⬙On⬙ or ⬙Off⬙ will flash on
the display, according to what has been previously set;
• A confirmation request message will appear on the
display;
• By pushing the UP
or DOWN buttons, select
⬙Yes⬙ (to confirm activation/deactivation) or ⬙No⬙
(to cancel);
• Push the MENU button briefly; a message confirming
the selection is displayed and you return to the menu
screen; Hold down the button to return to the standard
screen without storing.
When the system is deactivated, the dedicated warning
light in the instrument panel switches on.
Tire Reset
With this function, it is possible to reset the TPMS.
To reset, proceed as follows:
• Briefly push the MENU button. The display will show
Reset.
• Push the UP
or DOWN buttons to select “Yes”
or “No.”
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Briefly push the MENU button. The display will show
⬙Confirm.⬙
• Push the UP
or DOWN buttons to select ⬙Yes⬙
to reset or ⬙No⬙ to exit the page.
• Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
standard screen or to the main menu.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the main screen.
Push and release the UP
button to return to the first
menu option (Speed Beep).
Push and release the DOWN
button to return to the
last menu option (Daylights).
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest Autho-
rized Dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-
agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate that allows
you to access and change the customer programmable
features.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
6.5N Settings
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup and System Information.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature will allow you to select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system. Press the Set Language button on the
touchscreen, then press the desired language button on
the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “On” or “Off”
button on the touchscreen to turn the Touchscreen Beep
ON or OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen. Press the “On” or
“Off” button on the touchscreen to turn the Navigation
Turn-By-Turn In Cluster ON or OFF.
Units
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), odometer, and
navigation system changed between US and Metric units
of measure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
• Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of
measure independently displayed in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), and navigation system.
The following selectable units of measure are listed
below:
US
• Distance
Set to: “mi.”
• Fuel Consumption
Set to: “MPG” (US).
• Pressure
Set to: “psi.”
• Temperature
Set to: “°F.”
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Metric
• Distance
Set to: “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Set to: “L/100 km.”
• Pressure
Set to: “bar.”
• Temperature
Set to: “°C.”
Custom
Units can be customized independently from:
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
or “km/L” according to distance unit measure cho-
sen.
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°F” or “°C.”
Voice
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Long” button on the touch-
screen.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Never,” “w/Help” or “Always” but-
ton on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen.
Press the “On” or “Off” button on the touchscreen to turn
the Sync Time With GPS ON or OFF.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “12hrs” or “24hrs” button on the
touchscreen.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “On” or “Off” button on the
touchscreen.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
Settings button on the faceplate, then the “Safety &
Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“On” or “Off” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Blind Spot
Alert” button and select from “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights
& Chimes.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the brightness of the interior ambient lighting. To change
the Interior Ambient Lights setting, press the “+” or “–”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired Interior
Ambient Light level.
• Headlight Sensitivity
When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight
Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels (level
1 = minimum sensitivity, level 2 = medium sensitivity,
level 3 = maximum sensitivity); the greater the sensitivity
set, the less the external light variation required to turn
on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the
headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). To
change the Headlight Sensitivity setting, press the “1,”
“2” or “3” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired Headlight Sensitivity level.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating
that the setting has been selected.
• Greeting Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the greeting lights
to be turned On or Off. To change the Greeting Lights
setting, press the “On” or “Off” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired Greeting Light setting.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
while the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Steering Directed Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn
relative to a change in the direction of the steering wheel.
To make your selection, press the “Steering Directed
Lights” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
• Cornering Lights
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel
rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the
relevant side to improve visibility at night. To change the
Cornering Lights setting, press the “On” or “Off” button
on the touchscreen to select your desired Cornering
Lights setting.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers”
button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”
button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the Sound
Horn on Lock feature selected. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lamps with Lock” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Lock On
Exit” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the key fob. To make
your selection, press the “Flash Headlights With Lock”
button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
The button will highlight indicating that the setting has
been selected.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Lock” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the key fob
UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is
selected, you must press the key fob UNLOCK button
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All
Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock
on the first press of the key fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed pressing the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use key fob).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Pas-
sive Entry” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes”
or “No.” The button will highlight indicating that the
setting has been selected.
• Memory Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Key Fob On/Off” button on the touchscreen,
then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will highlight
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow/X button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.” The button will highlight
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
The button will highlight indicating that the setting has
been selected.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “+” or “–”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
• Radio Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a
preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP. To
change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN” or
“20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the
arrows to adjust, or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the
center.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or ”3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select On or Off.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Match”
button on the touchscreen, select On or Off.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Auto-On Radio
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On,” “Off” or “Recall Last”.
Phone/Bluetooth
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which mobile phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system.
• Paired Audio Devices
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting press the “Yes” or “No”
button on the touchscreen.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port.
Refer to the Uconnect 5.0 or 6.5 Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for iPod and external USB support capability.
AUX Jack And USB Port
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear
of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access
the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Player Operation
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of the switch
once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to
the beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control System
Controls
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials, an inner push knob and two push buttons.
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Recirculation Control
Push this control button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Manual Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
3. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
4. A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
5. Rear Defrost Control
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
6. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
The activation of the function is indicated by the rear
defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching
on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20
minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button, so that the
LED on the button switch is on, to enter recirculation
mode. It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation
on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the
introduction of polluted air.
Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if
there are many passengers on board, to prevent the
windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions more
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the
internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it
would considerably increase the possibility of the win-
dows misting.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Distribution Selection
Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of
the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger
compartment:
Air flow to the front windshield, front side win-
dow and front/rear footwell diffusers.
Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This
air distribution allows the passenger compart-
ment to be heated quickly.
Air flow distributed between central and side
dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.
Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passen-
ger’s body).
Air flow to windshield and side windows.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the climate control system com-
pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation
is set to ⬙outside air⬙ (LED on Recirculation Control
button off ). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
the windows. The user can always set air recirculation
and climate control system compressor.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Additional Electric Heater (If Equipped)
The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen-
ger compartment heating.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following
conditions are verified:
• outside temperature low;
• engine coolant temperature low;
• engine on;
• fan speed set to 1st speed;
• Temperature Control knob turned completely clock-
wise to red section.
The heater is switched off when at least one of the
conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does not
pollute the environment in the event of accidental leak-
age. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a allowed.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System (If
Equipped)
Controls
1. Driver Temperature Control
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
2. Recirculation Control
Push and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will
flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not
proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation
indicator is OFF, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode.
If the Recirculation indicator is ON, the Recirculation
setting is manual and Recirculation is ON.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
3. Rear Defrost Control
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
4. A/C Control
Push and release the A/C Control Button to change the
current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is
ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C
operation to switch into AUTO mode and the A/C
indicator will turn OFF.
5. ON/OFF Control
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual opera-
tion. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower
Control adjustment knob.
7. Blower Control Indicator LEDs
LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed.
8. Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets.
9. Front Defrost Control
Push and release the Front Defrost Control button to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Perform-
ing this function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. The blower speed may increase when
Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor
is switched ON (LED on button ON) and the air recircu-
lation is switched OFF (LED on button OFF). If the front
defrost mode is turned OFF, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
10. Passenger Temperature Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Rotate adjustment knob to set desired tempera-
ture.
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control
knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
11. SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
12. AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes.
Description
The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates
the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in
two zones: driver side and passenger side.
The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com-
partment and compensates for possible variations in
external climate conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
The climate control system can recognize extremely cold
(or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger compart-
ment and consequently provide optimal management of
the system’s capabilities.
NOTE: The reference temperature is 72° F (22° C) for
optimal comfort management.
The automatically controlled parameters and functions
are:
• air temperature at the driver/front passenger side
vents
• fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow)
• compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying
the air)
• air recirculation
All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat-
ing the system, selecting one or more functions and
modifying their parameters.
Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the
system will only override the settings for safety reasons.
Manual selections always take priority over automatic
ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or
the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons.
The amount of air introduced into the passenger com-
partment is not affected by car speed; it is regulated by
the fan, which is controlled electronically.
The air temperature is always automatically controlled
according to the temperature set on the display (except
for when the system is off or in certain conditions when
the compressor is not running).
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the following to be set or adjusted
manually:
• driver/passenger side air temperature
• fan speed (continuous variation)
• air distribution to seven positions
• compressor enablement
• rapid defrosting/demisting function
• air recirculation
• heated rear window
• system deactivation
NOTE: The climate control system detects the passenger
compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem-
perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror
and protected by a specific cover. Obstructing the field of
view of this sensor with any object could cause the
climate control system to operate with less than optimal
efficiency.
Switching On The Climate Control System
The climate control system can be switched on in differ-
ent ways: it is advisable to push the AUTO button and
turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures.
In this way the system operates completely automatically
to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of
the air introduced into the passenger compartment. It
also manages the air recirculation function and the acti-
vation of the air conditioning compressor.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
During automatic operation, you can change the set
temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any time
by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will
automatically change the settings to adjust to the new
requirements.
During completely automatic operation (AUTO), varying
the air flow and/or distribution (which are not dis-
played) causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and
the system to operate in MANUAL mode (displaying
both the flow and distribution requested).
When the compressor is deactivated, the AUTO opera-
tion remains active only if the system can guarantee
in-car comfort. Otherwise, the system switches to
MANUAL mode (the set temperatures will flash on the
display). The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the
passenger compartment.
Adjusting The Air Temperature
Rotate the Driver Temperature Control, or the Passenger
Temperature Control, dial clockwise or anti clockwise, to
adjust the air temperature in the front left (Driver Tem-
perature Control) or right (Passenger Temperature Con-
trol) zone of the passenger compartment.
The set temperatures are shown on the displays.
Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature
between the two zones.
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return
to the separate management of air temperatures in the
two zones.
Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or
the other activates the ⬙HI⬙ (maximum heating) or ⬙LO⬙
(maximum cooling) functions respectively.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob
to the desired temperature.
Air Distribution Selection
By pushing the Mode Control buttons (Up/Down/Right
arrows), it is possible to set one of the seven possible air
distributions manually:
• Up Arrow – Air flow to the windshield and front side
window diffusers to defrost them. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting. When the defrost
mode is selected, the blower will automatically default
to medium-high.
• Right Arrow – Air flow at central and side dashboard
vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot
season.
• Down Arrow – Air flow to the front and rear footwell
diffusers. This air distribution setting heats the passen-
ger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sen-
sation of warmth.
• Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between
footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side
dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution setting
is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.
• Up/Down Arrows – Air flow distributed between
footwell diffusers and windshield and front side win-
dow defrosting diffusers. This distribution setting al-
lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effec-
tively and prevents the windows from misting.
• Up/Right Arrows – Air flow distribution between
windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central
dashboard vents. This allows air to be sent to the
windshield in conditions of strong sunlight.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
• Up/Right/Down Arrows – Air flow distribution to all
diffusers on the car.
NOTE: Air always flows from the side dashboard diffus-
ers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow by
operating the wheel located near the corresponding
vents.
In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically
manages air distribution (the LEDs on the Mode Control
buttons are off).
When set manually, the air distribution is indicated by
the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on.
In combined function mode, functions are enabled to-
gether with those already set when the relevant button is
pushed. If a button whose function is already active is
pushed, the operation is cancelled and the corresponding
LED switches off.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a
manual selection, push the AUTO button.
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pushed (LED on button lit) the
climate control system automatically adjusts the follow-
ing settings in the corresponding zones:
• quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the
passenger compartment
• climate control system compressor and
• air recirculation.
Cancelling all previous manual adjustments.
This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button
switching on.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on,
the system switches to completely manual mode; it
displays the current flow and distribution status, which
will no longer be managed automatically.
If a manual intervention is made on at least the air
distribution, on compressor button or on the fan speed,
the LED switches off to indicate that the system is no
longer controlling all functions automatically.
NOTE: Should the system no longer be able to guarantee
the required temperature set in various passenger com-
partment zones, the set temperature value will flash for a
few seconds on the display.
To restore automatic system control after one or more
manual adjustments, push the AUTO button.
SYNC Button
Push the SYNC button (LED on button lit) to align the
passenger side air temperature with that of the driver
side.
This function makes temperature regulation easier when
the driver is travelling alone.
Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the
passenger side temperature and return to separate air
temperature management.
Air Recirculation
The Air Recirculation is managed according to the fol-
lowing operating logics:
• forced activation (air recirculation always on): indi-
cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
• forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air
intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on the
Recirculation Control button switching off
Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by push-
ing the Recirculation Control button.
When the On/Off button is pushed, the climate control
system automatically activates internal air recirculation
(LED on Recirculation Control button on).
In automatic operation, recirculation is managed auto-
matically by the system according to outside environ-
mental conditions.
NOTE:
• The engagement of the recirculation system makes it
possible to reach the required heating/cooling condi-
tions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting up inside (espe-
cially if the climate control system is off ). When the
outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off
(air drawn in from the outside) to prevent the win-
dows from misting up
• It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when
the outside temperature is low, since the windows
could mist up rapidly
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button switching on).
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system remembers that the compressor has been
switched off, even after the engine has stopped.
When the compressor is switched off, the system deacti-
vates air recirculation to prevent the windows from
misting up.
Pushing the A/C button will stop the AUTO MODE (the
AUTO LED will switch off). To restore automatic control
of compressor engagement, push the AUTO button
again.
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Moreover, under certain
environmental conditions, windows could mist rapidly
since the air is not dehumidified.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-DEF function)
Push the MAX-DEF button to activate (LED on button
on) the windshield and side window demisting function.
The climate control system carries out the following
operations:
• switches on the air conditioning compressor when
environmental conditions are suitable;
• switches air recirculation off;
• sets fan speed according to the engine coolant tem-
perature;
• directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers;
• activates the heated rear window;
• activates the heated windshield (if equipped);
• displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED
lit).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
NOTE: The Front Defrost Control (MAX-DEF) function
remains on for about three minutes from when the engine
coolant reaches the appropriate temperature.
When the function is activated, the LED on the AUTO
button switches off. With the function activated the only
possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed
and turning the heated rear window off.
When the Recirculation Control, Rear Defrost Control , or
AUTO buttons are pushed, the climate control system
will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the climate control system com-
pressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation
is set to ⬙outside air⬙ intake (LED on the recirculation
button off ).
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
It is, however, always possible to manage air recirculation
and the climate control system compressor manually.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear
window defrosting.
The effective activation of the function is indicated by the
rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel
switching ON.
This function switches OFF automatically after about 20
minutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not
switched on automatically the next time the engine is
started.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Switching Off The Climate Control System
Push the On/Off button.
With climate control system off:
• air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger
compartment from the outside;
• the compressor is off;
• the fan is off;
• the heated rear window can be activated / deacti-
vated.
NOTE: The climate control system control unit stores the
temperatures set before the system was switched off and
restores them when any button of the system is pushed
(except for the A/C Control button).
To restart the climate control system in fully automatic
mode push the AUTO button.
Additional Heater (If Equipped)
This allows the passenger compartment to be heated
more quickly in cold weather conditions.
The heater switches off automatically when the required
comfort conditions are achieved.
The additional heater activates automatically depending
on the environmental conditions and with engine started.
NOTE: The heater only operates if the outside tempera-
ture and engine coolant temperature are low. The heater
will not activate if the battery voltage is too low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
6.5N system.
Key Features:
• 5.0-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/Bluetooth
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
Uconnect 5.0N
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
Key Features:
• 6.5-inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM/FM/
USB/SD Card/Bluetooth
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
• GPS navigation (if equipped)
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 6.5N
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push to MUTE
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Say Vocal Commands
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session.
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 6.5N
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 6.5N Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth.
• Change source to iPod.
• Change source to USB.
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith.
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number).
Uconnect 6.5N Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 6.5N Phone
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (6.5N)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive
Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 6.5N Navigation
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say “Listen.” (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................269
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......269
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....269
▫ Normal Starting.......................269
▫ Cold Weather Operation ................270
▫ Extended Park Starting..................270
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................271
▫ After Starting ........................272
▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down” .............272
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .272
▫ Downshifting ........................274
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................274
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............276
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .276
▫ Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If
Equipped ...........................276
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........287
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................293
▫ Operation ...........................294
5
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........295
▫ Acceleration .........................295
▫ Traction ............................296
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............296
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................296
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................297
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............298
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................298
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................300
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .301
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .301
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............302
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............303
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................303
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........304
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........305
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................306
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........309
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............310
▫ Tire Markings ........................310
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........314
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........315
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........317
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........322
▫ Tire Pressure ........................322
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................324
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .325
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................326
▫ Tire Types ...........................326
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............328
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............328
▫ Tire Spinning ........................332
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................332
▫ Life Of Tire .........................333
▫ Replacement Tires .....................334
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......336
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....337
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) .......................338
▫ Base System .........................341
▫ General Information....................343
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo ........344
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................344
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............345
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................345
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................346
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................346
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............347
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22°F (–30°C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally
powered electric engine block heater is available as a
factory installed option.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5°F (–15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil
and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is
important to prevent engine damage and ensure
satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with a Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below the
gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE (R)
position.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lu-
bricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis-
sion.
Shift Pattern (Six-Speed)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
into PARK, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not),
and the brake pedal (and the lock button on the gear
selector) must be pressed.
Six-Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must push the brake pedal and the lock button on
the gear selector to move the gear selector out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, push the lock button on the front
of the gear selector and move the gear selector from
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Moving the gear selector into the Autostick
(-/+) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates
Autostick mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as
1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the Autostick position will manu-
ally select the transmission gear.
Transmission Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
To maximize fuel economy, the Euro Twin Clutch Six
Speed Transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become
familiar with some of the normal operational character-
istics of this transmission:
• During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
• At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
the transmission.
• Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
warning message will display in the Instrument Clus-
ter if cool down actions are needed.
• When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to
hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the vehicle in
position when the brake pedal is released. If the
accelerator pedal is not applied after a short time, the
vehicle will roll back. Either reapply the brake (to hold
the vehicle) or press the accelerator to climb the hill.
• Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis-
sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
GEAR UNAVAILABLE In AutoStick mode, the gear selected by the driver is
not available due to a fault condition. See your autho-
rized dealer for diagnosis and service.
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently
blocked. This occurs if REVERSE is requested while
moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if DRIVE is
requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph
[10 km/h] or faster). Make sure the vehicle is stopped
before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – THEN DRIVE OR REVERSE The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL
(due to a fault condition, or overheat due to excessive
idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes re-
leased), but the gear selector remains in gear. Shift
into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued
driving. If the transmission will not re-engage, see
your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC UNAVAILABLE The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically,
due to a fault condition. Use the AutoStick mode to
shift the transmission manually. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
REDUCE GEAR CHANGES The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick
mode, try to drive in one specific gear as much as
possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE,
the transmission will automatically modify its shift
schedule to reduce the number of shifts.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
TRANSMISSION GETTING HOT PRESS BRAKE The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usu-
ally due to repeated launches in stop-and-go traffic.
Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEU-
TRAL until “TRANSMISSION COOL READY TO
DRIVE” is displayed.
TRANS. HOT STOP SAFELY SHIFT TO PARK WAIT
TO COOL
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull
over, shift the transmission into PARK, and allow the
vehicle to cool until “TRANSMISSION COOL READY
TO DRIVE” is displayed.
TRANSMISSION COOL READY TO DRIVE The transmission has cooled down and the vehicle is
OK to drive.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION A transmission fault has been detected. See your au-
thorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
SERVICE A gear selector fault has been detected. See your au-
thorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SET PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not
functioning properly. Engage the parking brake to en-
sure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal and push the lock button
on the gear selector to move the gear selector out of
PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). To drive, push the lock button on
the front of the gear selector and move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Transmission Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates
AutoStick mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as
1, 2, 3, etc). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the Autostick position will manu-
ally select the transmission gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
(Continued)
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
CAUTION! (Continued)
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick
in this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat-
ing.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• With six-speed automatic (Aisin AW6F25) transmis-
sion, you can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or
third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be
helpful in snow or icy conditions. To select second or
third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the
gear selector rearward (+) once or twice.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON and
the engine started. The steering allows the force required
at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving
conditions.
NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
steering functionality can be achieved after a few sec-
onds.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the side button with your thumb, then
lower the lever completely.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
(Continued)
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
WARNING! (Continued)
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions and
are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-
lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in for
further information.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety
level of the whole vehicle.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
In critical situations (braking with different grip condi-
tions), through the DST function the ESC system controls
the steering to implement an additional torque contribu-
tion on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct
manoeuvre to the driver.
The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases
the safety and vehicle control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the
“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
ESC Off Switch
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, use reduced
size snow chains or traction devices with a maximum
projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text mes-
sage will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum
performance and fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91
octane gasoline or higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open the flapper
door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Funnel Location For vehicle With Optional Spare Tire Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Manual Transmis-
sion
Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission
Automatic
Transmission
(Aisin AW6F25
Transmission )
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, or a Euro
Twin Clutch transmission, may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed,
for any distance, if the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
To place the Euro Twin Clutch transmission in NEU-
TRAL, follow the procedure below:
1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position, without start-
ing the engine.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the key to the OFF position. The key will remain
in the ignition switch (it cannot be removed, since the
transmission is not in PARK). Leave the key in the OFF
position while being towed.
4. Release the brake pedal only when the parking brake
is applied, or the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........355
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............355
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................356
▫ Torque Specifications ...................357
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT ......................358
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................363
▫ Jack Location ........................363
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................364
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................365
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................366
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................370
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ............371
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............371
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................373
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............375
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............377
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........378
▫ Manual Transmission ...................380
6
▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission............380
▫ Automatic (Aisin AW6F25) Transmission .....381
䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .......381
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL ............383
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..............................384
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...........384
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear
storage area under the cargo floor.
Torque Patterns
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6mm) can be repaired; the
kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove
the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or
nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Sealant Bottle
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
WARNING! (Continued)
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached,
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
Attach the Clear flexible filling and tube of the compres-
sor directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation
process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
Authorized Dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph
(110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an Authorized Dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above, repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has
been treated with the Tire Service Kit
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at your Authorized Dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture
and serious injury or death.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area
underneath the cargo floor.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area
on the outside of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch.
Jack Location
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Jack Handle
4 — Emergency Allen key
5 — Emergency Spare Tire Bag
6 — Emergency Screwdriver
Spare Tire Location
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to
lower the spare tire.
3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK (Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn Off the ignition.
Winch Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an Euro Twin
Clutch Transmission in PARK; a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising
the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the traingular lift point
symbols on the sill molding).
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating
notches on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
WARNING!
•
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Spare Tire Stowage
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise (the flat tire must not be connected to the
winch) until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is
heard indicating the winch is properly stowed.
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire Bag and
stow the flat tire into the trunk.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side
of the engine compartment.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull upward on
the cover.
Positive Terminal
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Before connecting the jumper cables to the dis-
charged battery, the negative (-) battery cable must be
disconnected from the discharged battery. This is the only
way to successfully jump start the vehicle.
Follow these steps to disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Pull outward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal
release lever to the open position.
2. Lift up on the negative (-) battery cable terminal and
set aside.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative (-) battery cable terminal of the
discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) battery cable terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE: The negative (-) battery cable must be connected
to the negative (-) post of the battery.
Follow these steps to connect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to the nega-
tive (-) post of the battery.
2. Push inward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal
release lever to the closed position.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with Automatic or Euro Twin Clutch
Transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with Euro Twin Clutch transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or less.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the gear selector bezel and boot assembly from the
center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the gear
selector override access hole (at the right rear corner of
the gear selector assembly) and push and hold the
override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Gear Selector Override
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
MANUAL TRANS-
MISSION
EURO TWIN
CLUTCH TRANS-
MISSION
AUTOMATIC
(AISIN AW6F25)
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE Trans in NEUTRAL Trans in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position.
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery
is discharged, refer to ⬙Gear Selector Override⬙ in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Automatic (Aisin AW6F25) Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually,
proceed as follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the
cargo box.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully en-
gaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
cover.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to
have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would
like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure
special attention must be paid to the correct coupling
of the clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise
might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the
lower cover.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in the
rear cargo area inside the tool bag (if equipped), or on the
left side in the cargo box. If your vehicle is out of fuel and
an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the
filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
Release Tab Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .387
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .388
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................388
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................389
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................389
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........390
▫ Engine Oil ..........................391
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................393
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................393
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............394
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............395
▫ Body Lubrication .....................399
▫ Wiper Blades ........................399
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................403
▫ Exhaust System ......................403
▫ Cooling System ......................405
▫ Brake System ........................411
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......414
7
▫ Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If
Equipped ...........................414
▫ Automatic Transmission — Aisin AW6F25
Transmission — If Equipped .............416
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................418
䡵 FUSES ..............................426
▫ Underhood Fuses......................427
▫ Interior Fuses ........................430
▫ Rear Interior Fuses.....................434
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................435
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................436
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................438
▫ Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam......438
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps.......................440
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................441
▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps .................441
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................441
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .442
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................442
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................443
▫ Engine .............................443
▫ Chassis ............................445
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and Euro Twin
Clutch Transmission control systems. When these sys-
tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regu-
lations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the range mark-
ings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a
crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when
the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will
result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for tur-
bocharged engines under all types of operating condi-
tions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE
Grade)
MOPAR SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
and the blower operating, the blower can contact
hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter
access door to the HVAC housing.
5. Open the air filter access door.
A/C Air Filter Access Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
6. Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
A/C Air Filter Access Door Open A/C Air Filter Removal
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed
in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy the wipers must
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command,
the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to
a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is dis-
abled.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• Turn the ignition to the MAR/RUN position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the
ignition OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
WARNING! (Continued)
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
WARNING! (Continued)
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Transmission fluid is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the fluid as indicated in the
Maintenance Schedule. In addition, change the fluid if it
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Automatic Transmission — Aisin AW6F25
Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If the engine compartment is washed with an high
pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches
(20 centimeters) from filler surface.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, push the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – – Not Used
F09 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission (Aisin)
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 115V
F15 – – Not Used
F15 – 10 Amp Red Transmission (Aisin)
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain
F17 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
F30 – 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp Tan – PTC (Secondary)
F82 40 Amp Orange – Transmission
F83 40 Amp Orange – PTC (Primary)
F84 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12V
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Interior Fuse Panel
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp Brown Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate
Control System, TPMS, Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
7 F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Light
10 F42 5 Amp Tan BSM, ESP
11 F33 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Passenger Window
12 F34 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Passenger Window
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
13 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
14 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
15 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
16 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
17 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control
System, Stop Light, Reverse Gear, Sunroof,
Parking Sensor, Rear Camera
18 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
19 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror,
Parking Sensor
20 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Seat Regulation
21 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Rear Interior Fuses
The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side
in the rear compartment.
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
1 F61 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Regulation Seats
2 F62 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats
3 F64 20 Amp Yellow Hi Fi System
Rear Fuse Panel
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
4 F65 20 Amp Yellow Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized dealer)
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED (See Authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See Authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the
headlamp housing by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with
the openings in the metal holder.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
Bulb Removal Procedure Electrical Connector Removal
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
6. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner.
New Bulb Installation Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp
housing.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to the
body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to
the tail lamp housing.
6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing.
7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counterclockwise.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.1 Gallons 50 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula).
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified
Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission – If
Equipped
Gearbox: Use only MOPAR C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent.
Control System: Use only MOPAR C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic
Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Aisin
AW6F25 Transmission – If Equipped
Use only MOPAR AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months.
This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Check and adjust hand brake.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and re-
place if necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings, park-
ing brake function.
XXXXXXX
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace Brake Fluid every two
years. *
XXXXXXX
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X X X X X
Change the transmission fluid
(manual, or Euro Twin Clutch) if
using your vehicle for any of the
following: trailer towing, heavy
loading, taxi, police, delivery ser-
vice (commercial service), off-
road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at
sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XX X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................457
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............457
▫ Prepare A List ........................457
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............457
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............457
▫ FIAT Customer Center ..................458
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center ............458
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................459
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........459
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................459
▫ Service Contract ......................459
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............461
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............461
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .461
▫ In Canada...........................461
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............462
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
• Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 465
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............408
Adding Fuel .............................348
Adding Washer Fluid ......................403
Additives, Fuel ...........................346
AirBag.................................43
Advance Front Air Bag ....................44
Air Bag Operation .......................46
Air Bag Warning Light ....................56
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................47
Enhanced Accident Response ............53, 384
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..............58, 384
FrontAirBag...........................43
If A Deployment Occurs ...................52
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................47
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............57
Side Air Bags ...........................47
Air Bag Deployment ........................43
Air Bag Light .......................56, 83, 172
Air Bag Maintenance .......................57
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .393
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................395
Air Conditioning Filter .....................396
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............395, 396
Air Conditioning System ....................395
Air Pressure, Tires.........................324
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................15
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................15
Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission
Fluid Type ............................415
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............407, 442
Capacities ............................442
Disposal ..............................410
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................301
Appearance Care .........................418
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............15
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................229
Automatic Dimming Mirror...................91
468 INDEX
Automatic Transmission...........274, 287, 416, 418
Adding Fluid .......................417, 418
Autostick .............................293
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................418
Fluid Change ..........................418
Fluid Level Check .......................417
Fluid Type ............................445
Gear Ranges ...........................288
Special Additives .......................417
Autostick ...............................293
Auto Up Power Windows ....................27
Battery.................................394
Jump Starting ..........................371
Belts, Seat ...............................83
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................399
B-Pillar Location ..........................317
Brake Assist System .......................302
Brake Fluid .............................445
Brake, Parking ...........................298
Brakes .................................411
Brake System .........................300, 411
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................301
Master Cylinder ........................412
Parking ..............................298
Warning Light .........................168
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................276
Bulb Replacement......................436, 438
Bulbs, Light...........................85, 436
Camera, Rear ............................131
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........442
Capacities, Fluid ..........................442
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................383
Oil (Engine) ...........................392
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................82, 347
Car Washes .............................419
10
INDEX 469
Cellular Phone ...........................232
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............442
Chains, Tire .............................336
Changing A Flat Tire .......................363
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................312
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............81
Checks, Safety ............................81
Child Restraint ............................59
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................64
Child Restraints .........................59
Child Seat Installation .....................77
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........73
Infants And Child Restraints ................62
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....72
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................74
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......66
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........62
Seating Positions ........................65
Child Safety Locks .........................24
Cigar Lighter ............................145
Clean Air Gasoline ........................344
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................420
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................399
Climate Control ..........................233
Manual ..............................233
Clutch .................................412
Clutch Fluid .............................412
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............232
Compact Spare Tire........................329
Connector
UCI.................................229
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........229
Contract, Service ..........................459
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................442, 443
Cooling System...........................405
470 INDEX
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............408
Coolant Level ......................406, 410
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................410
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................406
Inspection ............................410
Points To Remember ..................409, 410
Pressure Cap ..........................409
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ............407
Corrosion Protection .......................418
Cruise Light .............................187
Cupholders .............................147
Customer Assistance .......................457
Data Recorder, Event .......................58
Daytime Running Lights ....................111
Dealer Service............................389
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................29
Defroster, Windshield ....................83, 235
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................388
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................417
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................410
Door Locks ..............................21
Door Opener, Garage.......................133
Downshifting ............................274
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................296
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........144
Electrical Power Outlets.....................144
Electric Remote Mirrors......................92
Electronic Brake Control System ...............301
Brake Assist System .....................302
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............309
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........121
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............305
10
INDEX 471
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........174
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .131, 188
Exit Trip ..............................194
Start Of Trip Procedure ...................194
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................29
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................355
Jacking ...............................363
Jump Starting ..........................371
Towing ..............................378
Emergency Trunk Release ....................29
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................393
Break-In Recommendations .................80
Checking Oil Level ......................391
Compartment ..........................387
Cooling ..............................405
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................82, 347
Fails To Start ..........................271
Flooded, Starting .......................271
Fuel Requirements ......................344
Oil ..............................391, 442
Oil Filler Cap ..........................392
Oil Filter .............................393
Oil Selection ...........................392
Overheating ...........................355
Starting ..............................269
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........53, 384
Ethanol ................................345
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission.........274, 276, 388
Fluid Type .....................414, 416, 445
Gear Ranges ...........................278
Event Data Recorder ........................58
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................82, 347
Exhaust System ........................82, 403
Exterior Lights ............................85
472 INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................393
Air Conditioning .......................396
Engine Fuel ...........................443
Engine Oil ............................393
Engine Oil Disposal .....................393
Flashers
Turn Signal .........................85, 186
Flooded Engine Starting ....................271
Fluid, Brake .............................445
Fluid Capacities ..........................442
Fluid Leaks ..............................85
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................417
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........443
Fog Lights ..............................112
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ..................101
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................375
Fuel...................................344
Adding ..............................348
Additives .............................346
Capacity .............................442
Clean Air .............................344
Ethanol ..............................345
Gasoline ..............................344
Light ................................178
Materials Added ........................346
Methanol .............................345
Octane Rating ..........................344
Requirements ..........................344
Tank Capacity ..........................442
Fueling ................................348
Fuses ..................................426
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)..............133
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................344
Gasoline (Fuel)........................344, 442
Gasoline, Reformulated..................344,
345
10
INDEX 473
Gear Ranges .........................278, 288
Gear Select Lever Override ..................377
General Maintenance.......................390
Glass Cleaning ...........................424
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................296
Headlights ..............................110
Cleaning .............................424
Passing ..............................111
Heated Mirrors............................93
Hill Start Assist...........................303
Holder, Cup .............................147
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............133
Hood Release ............................108
Ignition
Key..................................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................14
Information Center, Vehicle ..................188
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................90
Instrument Cluster..................165, 170, 186
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............164
Instrument Panel Cover .....................424
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............425
Interior Appearance Care....................422
Interior Lighting ..........................113
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................366
Jack Location ............................363
Jack Operation ........................363, 366
Jump Starting ............................371
474 INDEX
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................222
Passive Entry Programming ................222
Unlock Liftgate .........................222
Key, Replacement ..........................15
Keys ...................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................14
Lane Change Assist ........................112
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................34
Latches .................................85
Lead Free Gasoline ........................344
Leaks, Fluid ..............................85
Life Of Tires .............................333
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................28
Light Bulbs ...........................85, 436
Lighter, Cigar ............................145
Lights............................85, 109, 110
AirBag .........................56, 83, 172
Brake Assist Warning ....................306
Brake Warning .........................168
Bulb Replacement .......................438
Center Mounted Stop ....................442
Cruise ...............................187
Engine Temperature Warning ...............170
Exterior ...............................85
Low Fuel .............................178
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........180
Park .............................111,187
Passing ..............................111
Seat Belt Reminder ......................171
Security Alarm ..........................16
Service ...............................438
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............182
Traction Control ........................306
Turn Signal .........................85, 186
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .170, 186
10
INDEX 475
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................317
Locks
Child Protection .........................24
Door .................................21
Lubrication, Body .........................399
Lug Nuts ...............................356
Maintenance Free Battery....................394
Maintenance, General ......................390
Maintenance Procedures ....................390
Maintenance Schedule ......................448
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......180
Manual, Service ..........................462
Manual Transmission ...................272, 414
Fluid Level Check .......................414
Frequency Of Fluid Change ................414
Lubricant Selection ...................414, 445
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................412
Methanol ...............................345
Mirrors .................................90
Automatic Dimming ......................91
Electric Powered .........................92
Electric Remote .........................92
Heated ...............................93
Rearview ..............................90
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................338
MTBE/ETBE ............................345
Multi-Function Control Lever .................110
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................80
Occupant Restraints ........................30
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................344
Oil Change Indicator .......................192
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................192
Oil, Engine .......................391, 442, 443
476 INDEX
Capacity .............................442
Change Interval ........................392
Checking .............................391
Disposal ..............................393
Filter ................................393
Filter Disposal .........................393
Materials Added To ......................392
Pressure Warning Light ...................173
Recommendation ....................392, 442
Viscosity .............................392
Oil Filter, Change .........................393
Oil Filter, Selection ........................393
Oil Pressure Light .........................173
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................388
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............133
Operating Precautions ......................388
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Overheating, Engine .......................355
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,462
Paint Care ..............................418
Parking Brake............................298
ParkSense System, Rear .....................126
Passing Light ............................111
Pets....................................80
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........318
Power
Mirrors ...............................92
Sunroof ..............................142
Windows ..............................25
Power Steering Fluid.......................445
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............39
Preparation For Jacking .....................365
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................40
10
INDEX 477
Radial Ply Tires ..........................326
Radio Frequency
General Information ...................15, 21
Radio Operation ..........................232
Rear Camera ............................131
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................28
Rear Window Features ..................157, 160
Reclining Rear Seats .......................100
Recorder, Event Data .......................58
Recreational Towing .......................351
Reformulated Gasoline .....................344
Refrigerant ..............................396
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................32
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........230
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .224
Uconnect Settings .......................224
Replacement Bulbs ........................436
Replacement Keys .........................15
Replacement Parts.........................389
Replacement Tires .........................334
Reporting Safety Defects ....................461
Restraints, Child...........................59
Restraints, Occupant ........................30
Rotation, Tires ...........................337
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................83
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................85
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................461
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................82
Safety Information, Tire .....................310
Safety Tips ...............................81
Schedule, Maintenance .....................448
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........40
Energy Management Feature ................40
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................34
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............39
478 INDEX
Pregnant Women ........................39
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................40
Seat Belt Reminder .......................32
Seat Belt System .........................30
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................425
Seat Belt Reminder .........................32
Seat Belts .............................32, 83
Child Restraint ..........................59
Front Seat ........................32, 34, 37
Inspection .............................83
Operating Instructions ....................37
Pregnant Women ........................39
Pretensioners ...........................40
Rear Seat ..............................34
Reminder .............................171
Untwisting Procedure .....................39
Seats
Fold And Tumble Rear ...................101
Reclining ..............................96
Security Alarm ............................15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................14
Service Assistance .........................457
Service Contract ..........................459
Service Manuals ..........................462
Shift Lever Override .......................377
Shoulder Belts ............................34
Signals, Turn ..........................85, 186
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................336
Snow Tires ..............................327
Spare Tire ........................328, 329, 331
Spark Plugs .............................443
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................125
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................121
Starting ................................269
Automatic Transmission ..................269
Cold Weather ..........................270
Engine Fails To Start .....................271
10
INDEX 479
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission .............269
Manual Transmission ....................269
Steering
Tilt Column ...........................120
Wheel, Tilt ............................120
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............230
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .230
Storage ................................435
Stuck, Freeing............................375
Sun Roof ...............................142
Sun Visor Extension ........................94
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........43
Telescoping Steering Column .................120
Tilt Steering Column .......................120
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......317, 318
Tire Markings ............................310
Tires......................85, 322, 328, 329, 463
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................333
Air Pressure ...........................322
Chains ...............................336
Changing .............................363
Compact Spare .........................329
General Information ...............322, 328, 329
High Speed ...........................325
Inflation Pressures .......................324
Jacking ...............................363
Life Of Tires ...........................333
Load Capacity ......................317, 319
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............338
Pressure Warning Light ...................182
Quality Grading ........................463
Radial ...............................326
Replacement ...........................334
Rotation ..............................337
Safety ............................310, 322
Sizes ................................312
Snow Tires ............................327
480 INDEX
Spare Tire ......................328, 329, 331
Spinning .............................332
Tread Wear Indicators ....................332
Tire Safety Information .....................310
Towing ................................350
Disabled Vehicle ........................378
Recreational ...........................351
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........351
Traction .............................295, 296
Traction Control ..........................303
Trailer Towing ...........................350
Transmission
Automatic ......................274, 287, 416
Euro Twin Clutch ....................274, 276
Fluid .............................414, 416
Maintenance .......................414, 416
Manual ..............................272
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....133
Transporting Pets ..........................80
Tread Wear Indicators ......................332
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .......................29
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................29
Turn Signals .............................186
UCI Connector ...........................229
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ...........224
Uconnect Settings .......................224
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ...........222
Passive Entry Programming ................222
Uconnect Settings .......................222
Uconnect Voice Command ...................252
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................463
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .229
Universal Transmitter ......................133
Unleaded Gasoline ........................344
10
INDEX 481
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................39
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ..........................319
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........15
Vehicle Storage ...........................435
Warnings And Cautions ......................7
Warranty Information ....................4,461
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................403
Washers, Windshield .......................116
Washing Vehicle ..........................419
Water
Driving Through ........................296
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................420
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................420
Wind Buffeting ........................28, 144
Windows ................................25
Power ................................25
Windshield Defroster ....................83, 235
Windshield Washers .......................116
Windshield Wiper Blades....................399
Windshield Wipers ........................116
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................399
482 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 FIAT
®
500L
FIAT
®
500L
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
16BF-126-AD
